‫ﻓﺼﻞ ‪ - ٩‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫‪١-٩‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﺪﻳﻮﺳﺮﻫﺎ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺴـﺘﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﺘﺎﺏﺳﻨﺞ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻩ ﭘﻴﻜﻮﻛﻮﻟﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷـﺘﺎﺏﺳـﻨﺠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧـﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺧـﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺳﻄﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺩﻫـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ ﻏﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻫﻮﻡ )ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻏﺘﺸﺎﺵ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻬﺮ( ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺧـﻂ ﺗﻐﺬﻳـﻪ )ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﻭﭘـﺎ ‪ 50 Hz‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜـﺎ ‪60 Hz‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻳﻚ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺳـﺎﺱ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﭼـﻪ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺎﺕ ﻓـﺮﺁﻭﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﺪﻳﻮﺳﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮﮒ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﭘـﺬﻳﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻻ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﺁﻧـﺎﻟﻮﮒ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ ﺳـﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻓـﻮﻕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ(‪ .‬ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ)‪ op –amps‬ﻫﺎ( ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘـﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑﺨـﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﺕﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬـﻢ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻳـﻚ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴـﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﹰﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜـﺮﺩ ﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺒﺔ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺑﻨـﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳـﺎﻥ ﺳـﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ ﻓـﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺿﻤﻨﹰﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳـﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﺍﻳـﺪﻩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ﺻـﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻳـﺪﻩﺍﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﻬـﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳـﺖ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻓـﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻋـﺚ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣـﭗ )‪(op –amp‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 1000‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺴﺘﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ a \ ١-٩‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺍﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﺍﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ‪ G‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴـﺖ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ V2 /V1‬ﻛﻪ ‪ V1‬ﻭ ‪ V2‬ﻓﺎﺯﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ‪ G‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻘـﺎﺩﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ )ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ‪ (DC‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪a/‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪١-٩‬‬

‫‪b/١- ٩‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩﺗﺮ )ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪ (AC‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺻﺪﻕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ b \ ١-٩‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ R1‬ﻭ ‪ R2‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ‪ Vf‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ V2‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻴـﺪﺑﻚ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ ‪ H‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪H = V f /V f .‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ‪ H‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬

‫‪H‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬

‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺍﺳـﺖ )ﻣـﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ Vs‬ﻭ ‪Vf‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ H‬ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ V2‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒـﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ .( Vs + Vf‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪V2 = GV1 = G(Vs + V f ) = G(Vs + HV2 ).‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ V2 / Vs‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪V2‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪Vs‬‬ ‫) ‪(1 − GH‬‬
 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪٢-٩‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ G‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪≈ −‬‬ ‫‪= −‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪GH‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ ‪ H‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ G‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ G‬ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ٢-٩‬ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻣﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻠﺜـﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨـﺪ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ٢-٩‬ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺁﭖ ﺁﻣﭗ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬـﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭘـﻞ ﺷـﺪﺓ ‪ DC‬ﻭ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻗﻄﻌـﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧـﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﻟﺘـﺎﮊ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 105 - 1010‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳـﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ‪ DC‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺮﻛـﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﻬـﺮﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ‪ –6 Db/ octave‬ﻛـﺎﻫﺶ ﻣـﻲﻳﺎﺑـﺪ‬
‫) ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻀﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ – ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﺪﹰﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳـﻪ ﺁﭖ ﺁﻣـﭗ ﻣﺘﻘـﺎﺭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ‪ ±15 V‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 28 – 29 V‬ﻧﻮﺳـﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻮﺟﺎﺝ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ )‪ (Clipping‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ +‬ﻭ – ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢-٩‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ )‪ (+‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ )‪ (-‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ +‬ﻭ – ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﻓـﺎﺯﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺳـﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟــﻲ ﻧﺴــﺒﺖ ﺑــﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧــﻪ ﺍﺳــﺖ‪ .‬ﺑــﻪ ﻋﻨــﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜــﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔــﺮ ﻳــﻚ ﺳــﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳــﻲ ﺑــﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻏﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ‪ 1 MΩ‬ﻭ ‪ 100 MΩ‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 10 MΩ‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 500 MΩ‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ – ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ )ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪٣-٩‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪٤-٩‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣـﺪﻝ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻳـﻚ ﺁﭖ ﺁﻣـﭗ ﻣﻄـﺎﺑﻖ ﺑـﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ( ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣-٩‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪ V0‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﺰﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Vout = V0 − I L Z 2 .‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭗ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ‪ µA741‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﺼـﺎﺭ ‪ 741‬ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺁﻱﺳـﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻟﻴﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺷـﻜﻞ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧـﻮﻉ ‪ 8‬ﭘﺎﻳـﻪ )ﺩﻭ ﺭﺩﻳـﻒ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﭘﺎﻳـﻪ(‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪) Dual In Line‬ﻭﻳﺎ ‪ (DIL‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(٤-٩‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ‪ 741‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻪﭘﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻧﺸﺪﻥ ﺷـﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗـﺎ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﻤـﻞ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ ﺿـﻤﻦ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤـﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﭖ ﺁﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‪ 741‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪ ٣-٩‬ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭗ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ І‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩ )ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻛﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ІІ‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﹰﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﺸﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ І‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﺘـﺎﮊ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ )ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ ІІ‬ﻧﻘـﺾ ﻣـﻲﺷـﺪ!(‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻈـﻮﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ ﺍﺧـﺘﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳـﻤﺖ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ +15‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ –15‬ﻭﻟﺖ( ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ١-٣-٩‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ٥-٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳـﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ )‪ (-‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ π) 180°‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ( ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (٥-٩‬ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ‪ І‬ﻭ ‪ ІІ‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺭﻓﺘـﺎﺭ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ )ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﻟﺖ( ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ A‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ )ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﻟﺖ(‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ A‬ﺭﺍ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﹰﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ ІІ‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ‪ R1‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ‪ R2‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫‪V in‬‬ ‫‪V out‬‬

‫‪= −‬‬
‫‪R1‬‬ ‫‪R 2‬‬

‫‪ -٣‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺮﺓﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ A‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫‪V out‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬

‫ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫= ‪A‬‬ ‫‪= − 2 .‬‬
‫‪V in‬‬ ‫‪R1‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪٥-٩‬‬
 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪٦-٩‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻬـﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ ﻏﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٦-٩‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ І‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪ A .VA = VB‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻘﺴـﻴﻢﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪: (ІІ‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ‪:‬‬
‫‪R 1V out‬‬
‫= ‪VA‬‬ ‫‪V‬و‬ ‫‪in‬‬ ‫‪= VA,‬‬
‫‪R1 + R 2‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬

‫) ‪Vout ( R1 + R2‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬

‫=‪A‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=1+ 2 .‬‬
‫‪Vin‬‬ ‫‪R1‬‬ ‫‪R1‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ R1‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟـﻪ ﻓـﻮﻕ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﮕﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ )‪ (voltage follower‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻟـﻴﻦ ﻧﮕـﺎﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻧﻤـﻲﺭﺳـﺪ ﻓﺎﻳـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ ﻓـﻮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴـﺖ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﺶ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻓﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻓﺮ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺮﻳﺰﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺴـﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﺸﺎﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﮕﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﺑـﺎﻓﺮ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﺪﻳﻮﺳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬـﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬـﺎ ﻭ ﺳـﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻜﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٧-٩‬ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴـﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪٧-٩‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪٨-٩‬‬

‫ﻼ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺘﺎﺏﺳﻨﺞ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﺳـﺖ( ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ :‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻛﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ )ﻛﻪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ – ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻜـﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ A‬ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ ІІ‬ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪V in ،‬‬‫ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫= ‪I in‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪R‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ A‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ ‪ If‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭﮊﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧـﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫‪= C.‬‬ ‫‪( V out ).‬‬
‫‪dt‬‬

‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ ІІ‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪V in‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬

‫‪= − C .‬‬ ‫‪(V‬‬ ‫‪out‬‬ ‫‪),‬‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪dt‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪V in‬‬
‫‪dV‬‬ ‫‪out‬‬ ‫‪= −‬‬ ‫‪dt ,‬‬
‫) ‪( RC‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪−1‬‬
‫∫ ‪RC‬‬
‫‪V out‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪارﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪V in .dt +‬‬

‫ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﻌﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﻴﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒـ ﹰﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﺸـﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻫـﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧـﺪﺓ ‪DC‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ‪ DC‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )ﻛﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DC‬ﻫﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈـﻮﺭ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٨-٩‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ‪ ƒ-3Db‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪f‬‬ ‫‪− 3 dB‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪Hz‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪( 2 π R‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫) ‪C‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٧-٩‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ‪ C‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ‪ R‬ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﻋـﻮﺽ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ ﻓـﻮﻕ ﺑـﻪ ﺟـﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛـﻪ ﻋﻤـﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻟﮕﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺘﻖﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑـﺎ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩﻫـﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ!( ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﺘﻖﮔﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ dV‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪out‬‬ ‫‪= − RC ‬‬ ‫‪in‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ dt‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﻖﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺎﻝﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺿﻌﻔﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﭼﺎﺭﻩﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣـﻮﺝ ﻧـﻮﻳﺰ )ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﻃـﻮﺭﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻴﻠﻮﺳﻜﻮﭖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ( ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺗﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺑﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺷﻴﺐﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻞﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺘﻖﮔﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ٤-٩‬ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻀﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻭﺳـﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜـﻲ ﺍﻳـﺪﻩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﻤـﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎﻓـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴـﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳـﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴـﺖ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺿﺎﻳﺖﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻮﺟﺎﺝ ﻭ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻗﻀﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺪ ﭘـﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﻓﺮﻛـﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺮﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨـﺶ ‪ ٣-٣-٩‬ﻣﺆﻛـﺪﹰﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴـﺘﻲ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﮕـﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴـﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣـﻮﺝ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺷﻴﺐ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻀﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧـﺪ )‪(GBP‬‬
‫)‪ (Gain – Bandwidth Product‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ GBP‬ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻀﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ‪ DC‬ﻭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٩- ٩‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻓﺖ – ‪(roll‬‬
‫)‪ off‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺔﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻓﺖ‪ -6 dB/octave ،‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫـﺮ‬
‫ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ GBP‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﻣﺤـﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴـﻲ )ﻭ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻱ( ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ GBP‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 1*105‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬـﺮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ﭘﻬﻨـﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧـﺪ ‪ 100 kHz‬ﻭ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ‪ 100‬ﻭ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ‪ 1 kHz‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ‪ 1000‬ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ‪ 100 Hz‬ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺤﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻭ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫـﺮ ﭼـﻪ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻬﻨـﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧـﺪ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻬـﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫـﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺤﻪ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٩-٩‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻟﮕﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺳـﻢ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ – ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ – ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺣﻠﻘـﻪ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳـﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺍﻓـﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ‪ -6 dB/octave‬ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻀﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ – ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻀﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ – ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛـﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ )ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ( ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛـﺎﻫﺶ ﺑﻬـﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓـﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ – ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼـﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺑﻬـﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪–3dB‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٩-٩‬ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ – ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ‪ G O‬ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ‪ G O‬ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ƒC .‬ﻭ ‪ ƒO‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻀﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ – ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ )‪G O ƒO = G C ƒC = (1 × ƒ0dB‬‬

‫‪ ٥-٩‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺍﻝ‬

‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼـﺔ ﺍﻳـﺪﻩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻـﻔﺮ(‪ .‬ﻫـﺪﻑ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻓﺘـﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺎﺗﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﻓـﺮﺽ ﺭﻓﺘـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺍﻝ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺭﺍﻩﺣﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺍﻝ ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ١-٥-٩‬ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺍﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﻓـﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺩﻗﻴﻘﹰﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫـﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﻋﻤـﺎﻝ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ )‪ .(Common Mode Gain) (CMG‬ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪ CMG‬ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﺸـﺘﺮﻙ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴـﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧـﻪ ‪ CMG‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ‪ 741‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻠﻲ ‪ 105‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣـﺪ ﻣﺸـﺘﺮﻙ ﻭ ﻣـﺪ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴـﻴﻠﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ ﺣـﺬﻑ ﻣـﺪ ﻣﺸـﺘﺮﻙ ﻳـﺎ ‪CMRR‬‬
‫)‪ (Common Mode Rjection Ratio‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ CMRR‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬـﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫= ‪CMRR‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪CMRR‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪A ( ω ) / CMG‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ CMG = 5‬ﻭ ‪ A(ω) = 105‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ ‪ CMRR = 20 000‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪ .86 Db‬ﺍﺛﺮ ‪ CMG‬ﺑﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Vout‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻮدﻣﺘﺮك‪Vout = −(VA − VB ). A(ω ) + V‬‬ ‫‪.CMG‬‬

‫) ‪A(ω‬‬
‫ﻣﻮدﻣﺸﺘﺮك‪= −(V A − VB ). A(ω ) + V‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪CMRR‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻮدﻣﺸﺘﺮك ‪= A(ω ). (VA − VB ) +‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪CMRR ‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺳﻲﺑﻞ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ CMRR‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺘﺎﺷﻴﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ )ﺁﻱﺳﻲ( ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ )ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺣـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺘﺎﺷـﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣـﺪ ﻣﺸـﺘﺮﻙ ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣـﺪ ﻓـﻮﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(Voltage Supply Rejection Ratio) (VSRR‬‬ ‫‪ ٢-٥-٩‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬

‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺘﺎﺷﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻭﻟﺘـﺎﮊ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ﺗﺤـﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳـﻲ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ ﻭﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻌـﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺒـﻊ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺳـﺎﺯﻧﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ VSRR‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪VSRR‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٥- ٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ )‪ (V+) – (V-‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪0.1‬‬
‫‪ V‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ VSRR‬ﺁﻥ ‪ –74 Db‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ؟ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ‪ VSRR‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﻴﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ -74 Db = 20 . log10(x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ x‬ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬

‫‪− 74‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪/ 20‬‬

‫=‬ ‫‪1 × 10‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫=‬ ‫‪200‬‬ ‫‪µ V‬‬ ‫‪/ V‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ 1 V‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻋﻜﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜـﻪ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 200 µs‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮ ‪ 0.1 V‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺒـﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳـﻪ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ؟ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺘﺎﺷـﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﻣﺎﻛﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ‪ 0 Hz‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﻟﺘـﺎﮊ ‪ ،(DC‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ‪ 105‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ‪ ،0 Hz‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﺘـﺎﮊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆ V out (max) = 200 ( µ V / V ) × 0 .1(V ) × 10 5 = 2V .‬‬

‫)‪(Input Offset Voltage) (IOV‬‬ ‫‪ ٣-٥-٩‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺁﻓﺴﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Vin =0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Vout‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺻـﻔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻗﻄﻌـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘـﹰﺎ ﺑـﺎ ﻳﻜـﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﻜﺴـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﺒـﻖ‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺍﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤ ﹰ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٠-٩‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈـﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌـﺎﺩﻝ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺼـﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻟﺘـﺎﮊ ﺁﻓﺴـﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛـﻪ ‪IVO‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺁﻓﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٠-٩‬ﭘﺎﻳﻬﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺁﻓﺴﺖ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪١١-٩‬‬

‫‪ ٤-٥-٩‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬

‫ﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺰﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺎﺱ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻛـﻮﭼﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌـﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺁﻓﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺘﻨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺴـﺎﻭﻱ ﺑـﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﻣـﻮﺍﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١١-٩‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺷـﻜﻞ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺎﺗﻲ ﺣـﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ!‬

‫)‪(Slew Rate‬‬ ‫‪ ٥-٥-٩‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ )ﺍﺳﻠﻴﻮ ﺭﻳﺖ(‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳـﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﺘـﺎﮊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ )ﻳﺎ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭗ( ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫و ‪V out = V 0 sin ω t‬‬

‫ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪dV out‬‬
‫‪= ω .V‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫(‪cos‬‬ ‫‪ω t ).‬‬
‫‪dT‬‬
 ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪cos (ωt) =1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻛﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ Vout‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‬

‫‪ dV uot ‬‬

‫‪ dt ‬‬ ‫‪= ω V 0 = 2π fV 0 ,‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ max‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ ƒ‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭ ‪) V0‬ﭘﻴﻚ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ﺁﻱﺳـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻮﺟﺎﺝ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭼـﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘـﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 2 πƒ V0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 0.5 V/µs‬ﺍﺳـﺖ )ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣـﭗ ‪ ،(741‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ‪ (NE5539‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 800 V/µs‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺑﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﻁ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺗﻨـﺎﻭﺏ ‪ T‬ﺍﺯ ﻳـﻚ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣـﭗ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﺭﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﭼﻨـﺪ ﻣـﻮﺝ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ‪ n/T …،5 / T، 3 / T،1 / T‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﺔ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑـﺎ ‪ 1/n‬ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨـﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻳـﻚ ﻣـﻮﺝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ ‪ 1 kHz‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 5 kHz ،3 kHz ،1 kHz‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﻴﻒ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ٦-٥-٩‬ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ٥-٩‬ﻭ ‪ ٦-٩‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺿـﺢ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺁﻱﺳـﻲ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣـﭗ ﻣﺴـﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ A‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ R1‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(Operational Amplifier‬‬ ‫‪ ٦-٩‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭗ )ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ(‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻔﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺴـﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮﮔﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻌـﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻏﻠـﺐ ﺍﻫـﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ١-٩‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ٢-٩‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ١-٩‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ‬

‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‬ ‫‪٢٨-٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪١٦-٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‬ ‫‪٢٨-٩‬‬
 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٢-٩‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪ ٧-٩‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍﻳﺞ‬

‫‪ ١-٧-٩‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻜـﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨـﺪ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ١٢-٩‬ﺳـﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﻜـﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ )‪(-‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪ π) 180°‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ( ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫‪V out‬‬ ‫‪− R2‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪V in‬‬ ‫‪R1‬‬

‫ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺎﺱ ‪ R3‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴـﻴﻞ ﺯﻣـﻴﻦ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ R1‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ٢-٧-٩‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (I) ١٣-٩‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ )‪(+‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫‪V out‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬

‫‪= 1+ 1 .‬‬
‫‪V in‬‬ ‫‪R2‬‬
 ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ٢-٩‬ﻣﺪﺭﺍﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻱ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬

‫ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٢-٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ‪(NB‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ‪١٣-٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٤-٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓـﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﭙـﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑـﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٥-٩‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬ ‫)ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٢-٩‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (١٤-٩‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻴﻨـﻴﻤﻢ‬
‫ﻏﻴــﺮ ﻣﻌﻜــﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨــﺪﻩ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺳــﺖ‪ .‬ﺑــﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻴــﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻛﻨﻨــﺪﻩ ﻏﻴــﺮ ﻣﻌﻜــﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨــﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻣــﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ‪١٧-٩‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻢ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺳـﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺮﻳﮕـﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴـﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ ﺷـﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ ١٨-٩‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﻀـﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﻄـﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺷــﻜﻞ ‪ ١٩-٩‬ﺍﻟﻬــﺎﻡ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳــﺪ‪ .‬ﺑــﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤــﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢٠-٩‬ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﮕﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ٢١-٩‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ٢١-٩‬ﻭ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪٢٢-٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫)‪(AC → DC‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻳﻜﺴﻮ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٣-٩‬ﻭ ‪ ٢٤-٩‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٥-٩‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﻖﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺯﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٦-٩‬ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٧-٩‬ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬

‫]‪[1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ١٩-٩ – ٢١-٩‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﺮﺟـﻊ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (ii) ١٣-٩‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ R1 =0‬ﻭ ‪ R2‬ﺑﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻧﮕـﺎﻩ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ ﻳـﻚ ﺩﻧﺒـﺎﻟﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜـﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﻛﺸـﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻪ ‪ Vin‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺁﻣـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻨﺒـﻊ ﺳـﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Vin‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ R1‬ﻭ ‪ R2‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤـﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳـﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻜـﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (i) ١٣-٩‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (ii) ١٣-٩‬ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﮕﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ )ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‬

‫‪AC‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٤-٩‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ‬

‫‪AC‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٥-٩‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ‬

 ‫‪AC‬‬ ‫‪ ٣-٧-٩‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪ AC‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴـﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﺩﻳـﻚ ﺑـﻪ ‪ DC‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻓﺴﺖ ‪ DC‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻧﺸـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪١٤-٩‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ‪ AC‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫‪V out‬‬ ‫)‪(Z 2‬‬

‫ﺑﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= −‬‬
‫‪V in‬‬ ‫)‪(Z1‬‬
‫‪2 π jfR 2 C‬‬
‫‪= −‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪1 + 2 π jfR 1 C‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪) f = 0 Hz‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ (DC‬ﻭ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ∞→ ‪ ،f‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪ : Vout / Vin → - R2/ R1:‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻟﻲ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ( ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ‪ .(١٢-٩‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﺼـﻒ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ )ﺍﻓـﺖ ‪ (–3dB‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ‪ ƒ-3Db‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪f − 3 dB‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪2π R1C‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ƒ-3Db Hz‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﹰﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺴـﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ‪ DC‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓـﺖ‪ .‬ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪١٥-٩‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ‪ AC‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪V out‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪R ‬‬

‫‪= ‬‬ ‫‪  1 + 3  .‬‬
‫‪V in‬‬ ‫‪ 1 + 1 /( 2 π jfR 1 C )  ‬‬ ‫‪R2 ‬‬

‫(‬ ‫ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ] ‪f − 3 dB = 1 / [2 π R1 C‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ‪ ،0 Hz‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ )ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪Vout‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫و ‪= 1+ 2‬‬
‫‪Vin‬‬ ‫‪R1‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٦-٩‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ /‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ(‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٧-٩‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻜﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭﺯﻧﻲ‬

 ‫ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.((i) ١٣-٩‬‬

‫‪ ٤-٧-٩‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٦-٩‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤـﺎﻅ ﻋﻤﻠـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺁﻓﺴﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺰﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑـﻪ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺍﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ I‬ﮔﺬﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Vin/R‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﭙـﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺑـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺑﺨـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﻟﺘـﺎﮊ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ‪ Vin‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺛﺒﺎﺕﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻮﺩ ﺯﻧﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺿﻤﻨﹰﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﻳـﻚ ﺳـﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ٥-٧-٩‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻊﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٧-٩‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ V1‬ﻭ ‪ V2‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ‪ R1‬ﻭ ‪ R2‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﻫﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭﺯﻧﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭﺑـﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﻄـﻪ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳـﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪V out‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫‪= −  1 + 2 + ... + N‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪Rf‬‬ ‫‪ R1 R 2‬‬ ‫‪RN‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ٦-٧-٩‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٨-٩‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺯﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٨-٩‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﻭﺯﻧﻲ‬

‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪R4‬‬ ‫‪ 1 + R 2 / R1‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ R ‬‬
‫= ‪V out‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .V s 2 −  1  .V s 2 .‬‬
‫‪R3‬‬ ‫‪ 1 + R4 / R3‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ R2 ‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﺸـﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺣـﺬﻑ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪R  V‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫‪V out =  2 .V s +  1 + 2 . common   ,‬‬
‫‪ R1‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪R1   CMRR  ‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ Vs = Vs1-Vs2‬ﻭ ‪ CMMR‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫‪− R2 ‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫= ‪V out‬‬ ‫‪.V s + common  .‬‬
‫‪R1 ‬‬ ‫‪CMRR ‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ Vs1‬ﻭ ‪ Vs2‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪﻫﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺍﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪R1‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫و‪= 3‬‬ ‫‪R1 = R 3 + R 4 .‬‬
‫‪R2‬‬ ‫‪R4‬‬

‫‪ ٧-٧-٩‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﮔﺬﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﮔﺬﺭ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻥﮔﺬﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥﻧﮕﺬﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘـﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘـﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ )ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘـﺮ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟـﻪ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴـﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﺒـﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻮﺻـﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ(‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻻﮔﺬﺭ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﮔـﺬﺭ ﻭ ﭼﻬـﺎﺭ ﺧـﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻴﺎﻥﮔﺬﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺍﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻛﻨﻨـﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﻣﻨـﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺧـﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻧـﺪ ﻋﺒـﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷـﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘـﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺳﻲﺑﻞ )‪ (dB‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﻛﺘﺎﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﺘـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨـﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘـﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒـﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻓـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ -6 dB/octave‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻓـﺖ‪ -12 dB/octave ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﻃـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ… ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺨﺼﺼﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﺒـﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫـﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﺘـﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒـﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺐ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ]‪ [1‬ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﺘـﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻱﺩﻫﺎﻝ ﻫﺮ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭗ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻬـﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ‪ DC‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬـﺎﻱ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ٤-٥-٩‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ٤-٩‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻀﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ – ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ١-٧-٧-٩‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﮔﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٩-٩‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﮔﺬﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﻄﻊ ‪ –3 dB‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪fH‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪2π R 2 C 2‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﺭﻭﺵ‬ ‫‪dB/octave‬‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ‪ DC‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ R2/ R1‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ƒH =2‬ﻭ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ‪ DC‬ﺁﻥ ‪ 5‬ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﮔﺬﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪kHz‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫و ‪1 /( 2π R 2 C 2 ) = 2000‬‬ ‫‪R2 / R1 = 5.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٩-٩‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﮔﺬﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳـﻪ ﻣﺆﻟﻔـﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﻟﺨـﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ‪ C2 =0.01 µF‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫و ‪R 2 = 7 . 96 k Ω‬‬ ‫‪R1 = 1.59kΩ.‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ R3‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﻣـﻮﺍﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫‪ R1‬ﻭ ‪ R2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫‪R1 R2‬‬ ‫‪7960 × 1590‬‬
‫= ‪R3‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 1325 Ω .‬‬
‫‪R1 + R‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪7960 + 1590‬‬
 ‫‪ ٢-٧-٧-٩‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﮔﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٠-٩‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﮔﺬﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪fL‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪2π R1 C 1‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ )ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﻄﻊ( ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ‪ - R2/ R1‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﭘـﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ‪ ، fL‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪ -6 dB/octave‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ٣-٧-٧-٩‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﺬﺭ )ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ(‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢١-٩‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻴﺎﻥﮔﺬﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪fL‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫= ‪fH‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪2π R1C1‬‬ ‫‪2π R 2 C 2‬‬

‫‪-6 dB/octave‬‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ( ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ .- R2/ R1‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻓﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٠-٩‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﮔﺬﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢١-٩‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ‬

 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ƒH = 5‬ﻭ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ 10‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬ ‫‪kHz‬‬ ‫‪ ƒL =2‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪kHz‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺭﻭﺍﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭ) ‪ 5000 = 1 /( 2π R2 C 2‬ﻭ ) ‪2000 = 1 /( 2π R1C1‬‬ ‫‪− R2 / R1 =10‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺳﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘـﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﻟﺨـﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ!(‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ C1 = 0.01 µF‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪R1 = 7.96kΩ‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪R 2 = 796 k Ω ,‬‬ ‫‪C1 = 0.04µF .‬‬

‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪R3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫‪R1R 2‬‬ ‫‪7960 × 796‬‬
‫= ‪R3‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 724 Ω .‬‬
‫‪R1 + R 2‬‬ ‫‪7960 + 796‬‬

‫‪ ٤-٧-٧-٩‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺎﻥﻧﮕﺬﺭ )ﻧﺎﭺ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ(‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺗﹰﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻴﺎﻥﮔﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ – ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ )ﻃﺒـﻖ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪-٩‬‬
‫‪ (٢٢‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ƒL‬ﻭ ‪ ƒH‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ƒL‬ﻭ ‪ ƒH‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ a/٢٢-٩‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻴﺎﻥﮔﺬﺭ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ b/٢٢-٩‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ )ﻣﻴﺎﻥﮔﺬﺭ(‬

 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٣-٩‬ﻳﻜﺴﻮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬

‫ﻼ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻃﺮﺍﺣـﻲ ﺑﺎﻧـﺪ ﻋﺒـﻮﺭ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻗـﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ٥-٧-٧-٩‬ﻳﻜﺴﻮﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﺴﻮﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ ‪ (1 V‬ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ 0.7 V‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ‪ .‬ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٣-٩‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﺸـﻜﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣـﻞ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ )ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻴﻜـﺮﻭ ﻭﻟـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ( ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭗ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٣-٩‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘـﺎﮊ ﺗﻔﺎﺿـﻠﻲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭗ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 50 µs‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭗ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺍﺷـﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﻜـﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴـﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣـﭗ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﺏ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻌﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٤-٩‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻳـﻮﺩ ‪ D2‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷـﺒﺎﻉ ﺷـﺪﻥ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣـﭗ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٤-٩‬ﻳﻜﺴﻮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ‬

 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٥-٩‬ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮ‬

‫‪ ٦-٧-٧-٩‬ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٥-٩‬ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ٣-٣-٩‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪارﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪Vout = −1 / RC ∫ Vin .dt +‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ‪ DC‬ﺑـﻪ ﺳـﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ 90°‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﺴﻴﻨﻮﺳﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﻣﺆﻟﻔـﻪ‬
‫‪ DC‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺴﻴﻨﻮﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﺴـﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴـﺖ ﺳـﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳـﻲ‬
‫ﻣــﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﺯﻣــﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﮕــﺮﺍﻝ ﻣﺮﺑــﻮﻁ ﺑــﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺳــﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑــﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﻓﻘــﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤــﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﻴﻠﻮﺳــﻜﻮﭖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻴﻠﻮﺳﻜﻮﭖ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺪ ‪ X-Y‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺗـﺎ ﻣﻨﺤﻨـﻲ ﻟﻴﺴـﺎﮊﻭﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺁﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﻨـﻲ ﻟﻴﺴـﺎﮊﻭﻱ‬
‫)‪ (Lissajous‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳـﻲ ﺧـﺎﻟﺺ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٥-٩‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ ﺁﻓﺴـﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻴﺐﺩﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﮕـﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮﻫـﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻏﺎﻟﺒﹰﺎ ﺑﺎ ‪ (FET‬ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﻮﺭﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺗﻨﻬـﺎ ﻧﺸـﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻃـﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ‪ R2‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ﻣـﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ƒ-3dB‬ﺍﺛﺮ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﻄـﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪f − 3 dB = 1 /( 2π R 2C ).‬‬
 ‫‪ ٧-٧-٧-٩‬ﻣﺸﺘﻖﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝﮔﻴﺮ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (٢٥-٩‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٦-٩‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜـﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻋـﻮﺽ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺘﻖﮔﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪V out = − RC ( dV in / dt ).‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺘﻖﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺘﻖﮔﻴﺮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻧﻮﻳﺰﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖ‬
‫ﻻ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﻛﻬـﺎﻱ ﺗﻴـﺰ ﻭ ﺿـﺮﺑﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺸـﺘﻖ ﻫـﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﹰﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﻖﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﺎﻳـﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ‪ Cx‬ﻭ ‪ Rx‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٦-٩‬ﺣﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ٨-٧-٧-٩‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑـﺎﺯ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ (٢٧-٩‬ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ‪ 741‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 105‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 100 dB‬ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻧﺮﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻫـﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺴـﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻛﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٦-٩‬ﻣﺸﺘﻖﮔﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٧-٩‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﭘﻼﺭﻳﺘﺔ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼـﻪ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭙﻬـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ ‪ 741‬ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﻱ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪ 741‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ ﺳـﺮﻋﺖ ﺑـﺎﻻ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺩﺭ ‪ 741‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ‪ 106 V/s‬ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ .‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻗﻼﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣـﭗ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨـﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ LM311 ،LM306‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ LM393‬ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﺔ ‪ National‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻱﺳـﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓـﺖ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﺳـﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 109 V/s‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﺰﻭﻣﹰﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻟﺰﻭﻣﹰﺎ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ﺛـﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ ﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻣﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳـﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑـﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴـﺮ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳـﺎﻥ )ﻛﻮﭼـﻚ( ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴـﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ )ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑـﺎ ﺩﺍﻣﻨـﻪ ‪ (5 V‬ﺭﺍﻗﺒـﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﻳﺘﺎﺷﻴﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ٩-٧-٧-٩‬ﻣﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‬

‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻏﻴﺮﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻨﺒـﻊ ﺟﺮﻳـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺭﻳﺰﺩ )ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻟﺘـﺎﮊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺒـﻊ ﺟﺮﻳـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤـﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺵ ﺁﻱﺳﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ(‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ ﺳـﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺭﻭﻟﺘـﺎﮊ )ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻳﻬـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪﻱ( ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺵ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٨-٩‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﻜـﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﺯﻣـﻴﻦ ﻣﺠـﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﺘﺼـﻞ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘـﺎﮊ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٢٨-٩‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1 V/µA‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳـﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬـﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻳـﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑـﺎ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪٢٨-٩‬‬
 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪٢٩-٩‬‬

‫‪ ١٠-٧-٧-٩‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺰﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻚ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒـﻊ ﺑـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑـﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﺗـﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧـﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﮕـﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧـﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪٢٩-٩‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﺪﺑﻚ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ‪ CP‬ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫)ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ G‬ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣـﭗ ﺍﺳـﺖ(‬ ‫)‪C P = CF (G − 1‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Q.G‬‬
‫= ‪Vout‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫)‪CS + CC − CF (G − 1‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺁﭖ ﺍﻣﭗ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫= ‪Vout‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪CF‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻇﺮﻓﻴـﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﻭﻟﺘـﺎﮊ ‪ Vout‬ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳـﺐ ﺑـﺎ ﺑـﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ Q‬ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤـﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ‪ CC‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﺸﻢ ﭘﻮﺷﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ‪ CC‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ‪ CF‬ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣـﺖ‬
‫‪ RF‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫≥ ‪RF‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪2πfC F‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ ƒ‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬